Table Of Contents
Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
Before You Begin
NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules
DLP-G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode
DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode
DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port
DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM
DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
DLP-G280 Delete a PPM
NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group
NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card
NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
DLP-G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings
DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate
DLP-G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate
DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy Payloads
DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group
DLP-G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings
DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings
DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings
DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads
DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload
DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings
NTP-G333 Add an ADM-10G card to an Existing Topology
NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings
DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings
DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings
DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
DLP-G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings
DLP-G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings
NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
DLP-G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
DLP-G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
DLP-G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings
DLP-G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
DLP-G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
DLP-G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
DLP-G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
DLP-G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
DLP-G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
DLP-G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
DLP-G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
DLP-G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings
DLP-G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
DLP-G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
DLP-G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 Payloads
DLP-G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings
NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
DLP-G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings
DLP-G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings
DLP-G667 Change the 40G Muxponder Line SONET (OC-192) or SDH (STM-64), or Ethernet Line Settings
DLP-G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
DLP-G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
DLP-G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC Payloads
DLP-G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings
NTP-G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings
DLP-G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC
DLP-G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC
DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC
Before You Begin
DLP-G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC
DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC
DLP-G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
DLP-G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
DLP-G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
NTP-G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings
DLP-G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC
DLP-G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC
DLP-G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC
Before You Begin
DLP-G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC
DLP-G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
DLP-G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
DLP-G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
DLP-G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC
DLP-G629 Create a MEP Using CTC
DLP-G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC
DLP-G631 Create a MIP Using CTC
DLP-G632 Delete a MIP Using CTC
DLP-G633 Ping MEP Using CTC
DLP-G634 Traceroute MEP Using CTC
NTP-G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings
DLP-G639 Enable or Disable EFM for Each Port Using CTC
Before You Begin
DLP-G640 Configure EFM Parameters Using CTC
DLP-G641 Configure EFM Link Monitoring Parameters Using CTC
DLP-G642 Enable Remote Loopback for Each Port Using CTC
NTP-G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings
DLP-G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for Ports in a REP Segment Using CTC
DLP-G645 Create a Segment Using CTC
Before You Begin
DLP-G646 Edit a Segment Using CTC
DLP-G647 Activate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC
DLP-G648 Deactivate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC
NTP-G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings, and PM Thresholds
DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings
DLP-G684 Provision the GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings
DLP-G685 Provision the GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings
DLP-G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 Protection Settings
DLP-G507 Enable a Different GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card as the Master Card
DLP-G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI Ports
DLP-G383 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service Settings
DLP-G470 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Class of Service (CoS) Settings
DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings
DLP-G221 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
DLP-G460 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
DLP-G385 Provision the MAC Filter Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card
NTP-G237 Retrieve and Clear MAC Addresses on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
DLP-G546 View Card MAC Addresses on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
NTP-G311 Provision the Storm Control Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
NTP-G205 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
DLP-G509 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
NTP-G289 Provision CVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card
NTP-G208 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card
DLP-G515 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC
DLP-G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile
NTP-G204 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
DLP-G511 Enable IGMP Snooping, IGMP Fast Leave and IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
NTP-G206 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card
DLP-G513 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC
DLP-G386 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G387 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G388 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card RMON Thresholds
DLP-G389 Change the Gigabit Ethernet Optical Transport Network Settings
NTP-G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring
DLP-G687 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Facing Master Card on a FAPS Ring
DLP-G688 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Between the Slave Cards on a FAPS Ring
NTP-G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
DLP-G453 Change the OTU2_XP Card Settings
DLP-G454 Change the OTU2_XP Line Settings
DLP-G455 Change the OTU2_XP Line Section Trace Settings
DLP-G456 Change the OTU2_XP Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads
DLP-G457 Provision the OTU2_XP Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
DLP-G462 Change the OTU2_XP Line RMON Thresholds for the 10G Ethernet and 10G FC Payloads
DLP-G458 Change the OTU2_XP OTN Settings
DLP-G523 Change the OTU2_XP Path Trace Settings
DLP-G524 Provision the OTU2_XP Path Settings for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy Configuration
NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings
NTP-G192 Force FPGA Update
NTP-G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group
NTP-G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator
Provision Transponder and Muxponder Cards
This chapter explains how to provision transponder (TXP), muxponder (MXP), Xponder (GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE), and ADM-10G cards. The provisioning must be performed before you provision the dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) network and create circuits.
Note 
The procedures and tasks described in this chapter for the Cisco ONS 15454 platform is applicable to the Cisco ONS 15454 M2 and Cisco ONS 15454 M6 platforms, unless noted otherwise.
Note Unless otherwise specified, "ONS 15454" refers to both ANSI and ETSI shelf assemblies.
Before You Begin
Before performing any of the following procedures, investigate all alarms and clear any trouble conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide as necessary.
Caution Provisioning TXP and MXP cards can be service affecting. You should make all changes during a scheduled maintenance window.
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
1. G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules—Complete this procedure to provision a multirate pluggable port module (PPM), provision or change the optical line rate of a PPM, or delete a PPM. PPMs provide the fiber interface to the TXP, MXP, and ADM-10G cards. With the exception of the TXP_MR_10G card, all TXPs, MXPs, and ADM-10G cards accept PPMs.
2. G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group—As needed, complete this procedure for TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards that will be protected with Y-cable protection.
3. G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card—As needed, complete this procedure to create a splitter protection group for an OTU2_XP card.
4. G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards—As needed, complete this procedure to create 1+1 protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
5. G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
6. G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
7. G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to provision the transmission settings for ADM-10G cards.
8. G333 Add an ADM-10G card to an Existing Topology—As needed, complete this procedure to add an ADM-10G card to an existing topology.
9. G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
10. G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
11. G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards.
12. G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for 40G-MXP-C card.
13. G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings—As needed, complete this procedure to change the channel group settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
14. G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings—As needed, complete this procedure to change the CFM settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
15. G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings—As needed, complete this procedure to change the EFM settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
16. G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings—As needed, complete this procedure to change the REP settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
17. G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings, and PM Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
18. G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring—As needed, complete this procedure to add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring.
19. G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for OTU2_XP cards.
20. G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings—As needed, complete this procedure to change the automatic laser shutdown settings for a TXP or MXP card.
21. G192 Force FPGA Update—As needed, complete this procedure to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards.
22. G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group—As needed, complete this procedure to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards when the card is part of a protection group.
23. G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator—As needed, complete this procedure to enable error decorrelator on a TXP_MR_10EX_C, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card.
Note Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM supports IBM's 5G DDR (Double Data Rate) InfiniBand1 interfaces.
NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules
Purpose
|
Complete this procedure to provision a multirate PPM, provision the optical line rate of a multirate PPM, or delete a single-rate or multirate PPM.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G63 Install an SFP or XFP
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note If a single-rate PPM is installed, the PPM screen will autoprovision and no further steps are necessary.
Note When you autoprovision a PPM, initial alarm and TCA defaults are supplied by Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) depending on your port and rate selections and the type of PPM. These default values can be changed after you install the PPM.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task to log into an ONS 15454 on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Click the Alarms tab:
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not turned on. See the "DLP-G128 Disable Alarm Filtering" task as necessary.
b. Verify that no unexplained conditions appear. If unexplained conditions appear, resolve them before continuing. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide.
Step 3 If you are provisioning a MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card, complete the "DLP-G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode" task. If not, continue with Step 4
Step 4 If you are provisioning a MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card, complete the "DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode" task. If not, continue with Step 5.
Step 5 If you are provisioning a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card, complete the "DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode" task. If not, continue with Step 6.
Step 6 If you are provisioning a OTU2_XP card, complete the "DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode" task. If not, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 If you are provisioning a PPM on an ADM-10G card, complete the "DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port" task. If not, continue with Step 8.
Step 8 Complete the "DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM" task for TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP ports with multirate PPMs. If you already preprovisioned the multirate PPM (G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot), skip this step and continue with Step 9.
Step 9 If you are provisioning an IBM ETR_CLO (External Time Reference - Control Link Oscillator) or InterSystem Coupling Link (ISC) service on the PPM, complete "DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services" task. Otherwise, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Complete the "DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate" task to assign a line rate to a TXP, MXP, or OTU2_XP port after the PPM is provisioned. (This task is not performed for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.)
Step 11 If you need to delete a PPM at any point in this procedure, complete the "DLP-G280 Delete a PPM" task.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode
Purpose
|
This task changes the card mode for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards. The card mode determines which PPMs can be provisioned for the card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If the service state is correct, continue with Step 6. If not, complete the following steps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance (ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs.
Step 5 Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If the service state is correct, continue with Step 6. If not, complete the following steps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance (ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 7 Change the Card Mode as needed:
•FC-GE—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 1-1 and 2-1 only), FC2G (Port 1-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1 and 2-1 only), FICON2G (Port 1-1 only), and ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 8-1).
•Mixed—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G and ONE_GE (Port 1-1 only), ESCON (Ports 5-1 through 8-1 only)
•ESCON—Choose this option if you will provision the ESCON PPM on Ports 1-1 through 8-1.
Note The Provisioning > Card tab also has the display-only Tunable Wavelengths field. This field shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed in the format:
first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths.
For example, 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode
Purpose
|
This task changes the port mode for the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards. The port mode determines which PPMs can be provisioned on the ports.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards have two port mode groups, one for Ports 1 through 4, and the second for Ports 5 through 8. To change the port mode, all ports within the selected port group must be in OOS (out-of-service) service state. Ports in the second port group do not need to be in OOS service state if you are not changing the port mode for the second port group. Before you change the port mode, you must also ensure that any PPM port rate provisioned for the selected port group is deleted (see "DLP-G280 Delete a PPM" task).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to change the port mode.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Change the port mode as described in Table 6-1.
Note The PPM port rates are provisioned in the "DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM" task.
Table 6-1 10G Data Muxponder Card Port Modes
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port 1-4 Mode
|
Sets the mode of operation for Ports 1-1 through 4-1.
|
Chose one of the following:
•FC-GE_ISC—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), FC2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), FICON2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only).
•FC4G—Choose this option if you will provision an FC4G or FICON4G PPM (Port 1-1 only).
|
Port 5-8 Mode
|
Sets the mode of operation for Ports 5-1 through 8-1.
|
Chose one of the following:
•FC-GE_ISC—choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), FC2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), FICON2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only), ONE_GE (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only).
•FC4G—choose this option if you will provision an FC4G or FICON4G PPM port rate (Port 5-1 only).
|
Note The Provisioning > Cards tab also has a display-only Tunable Wavelengths field which shows the wavelengths supported by the card. If a MXP_MR_10DME_C card is installed, the 32 C-band wavelengths appear. If the MXP_MR_10DME_L card is installed, the 32 L-band wavelengths appear. If the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card is installed, the 82 C-band wavelengths appear.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Note Loopbacks on MXP-MR-10DME are not applicable when Fiber Channel switches are present.
Note If the Fiber Channel switch version is not present then the Distance Extension settings are not supported.
DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode
Purpose
|
This task changes the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card mode. 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards can be provisioned as a Layer 2 Ethernet switch or a 10G Ethernet TXP. GE_XP and GE_XPE cards can be provisioned as a Layer 2 Ethernet switch, 10G Ethernet MXP, or 20G Ethernet MXP.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the card mode.
Step 2 In card view, click Provisioning > Ether Ports > Ports.
Step 3 Verify that any provisioned client or trunk ports have an OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state in the Service State column. If so, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the following substeps.
a. For the first port that is not out of service, in the Admin State column, choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI).
b. Repeat Step a for each port that is not out of service.
c. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 5 Choose one of the card modes shown in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes
Mode
|
Cards
|
Description
|
L2 over DWDM
|
GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
|
Provisions the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE as a Layer 2 switch.
|
10GE TXP
|
10GE_XP
10GE_XPE
|
Provisions the 10GE_XP or 10GE_XPE as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet transponder. Traffic received on the 10GE client Port 1-1 is sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 3-1, and traffic received on 10 Gigabit Ethernet client Port 2-1 is sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 4-1.
|
10GE MXP
|
GE_XP
GE_XPE
|
Provisions the GE_XP or GE_XPE as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet muxponder. Traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports 1-1 through 10-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 21-1, and traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports 11-1 through 20-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 22-1.
|
20GE MXP
|
GE_XP
GE_XPE
|
Provisions the GE_XP or GE_XPE as a 20 Gigabit Ethernet muxponder. Traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports 1-1 through 20-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 21-1. Trunk port 22-1 is not used.
|
:
The GE-XP and GE-XPE cards operating in 10GE MXP mode and configured for 100% traffic flow, do not drop frames when up to nine ports are in use. However, when all the ten ports are in use, some frames are dropped. When the tenth port is to be used, configure the Committed Info Rate (CIR) at 55% on any one of the ports. For more information about configuring the CIR, see the "DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings" task.
Step 6 Click Apply, then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port
Purpose
|
This task provisions a fixed-rate PPM and port on an ADM-10G PPM card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to provision PPM settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
•PPM—Choose the SFP you want to install from the drop-down list.
•PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 6 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Ports dialog box appears.
Step 7 In the Create Ports dialog box, complete the following:
•Port—Choose the port you want to configure from the drop-down list.
•Port Type—Choose the port type, such as OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or ONE-GE from the drop-down list.
–Ports 1 - 8 can only be OC-3, OC-12, or ONE_GE
–Ports 9 - 12 can on be OC-3 or OC-12
–Ports 13 - 16 can only be OC-3, OC-12, or OC-48
Step 8 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Ports area. The port type you provisioned is listed in the Rate column.
Step 9 If you want to provision a PPM or another port, repeat Steps 4 through 8.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode
Purpose
|
This task changes the OTU2_XP card mode. The card mode determines which PPMs can be provisioned for the card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Caution Changing the card configuration to 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy automatically replaces the current port configurations (Ports 1 and 3) to 10G Ethernet and OC192. This resets and reboots the OTU2_XP card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where you want to change the card mode.
Step 2 In card view, click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tab.
Step 3 Verify that all provisioned client or trunk ports have an OOS-MA, DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled, disabled (ETSI) service state in the Service State column. If so, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the following substeps.
a. For the first port that is not out of service, in the Admin State column, choose OOS, DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked, disabled (ETSI).
b. Repeat Step a for each port that is not out of service.
c. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Card tab.
Step 5 Change the Card Configuration as needed:
•Transponder—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a transponder. Port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 are both configured as transponders. This is the default card configuration.
•Standard Regen—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a standard regenerator (with E-FEC only on one port). Port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 are both configured as regenerators.
•Enhanced FEC—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as an E-FEC regenerator (with E-FEC on two ports). Port pair 3-4 is configured as enhanced regenerator. Ports 1 and 2 are not used.
•Mixed—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a transponder and a standard regenerator (mixed configuration). One of the port pair (1-3 or 2-4) is configured as a transponder and the other port pair as a standard regenerator.
•10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card to enable the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion. Port pair 1-3 supports LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion. Port pair 2-4 can be configured either as a transponder or a standard regenerator.
Note If you revert to the previous release (release earlier than 9.10), be sure to disable the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature. If you do not disable the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy feature, an error message stating that the user needs to disable 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy feature before reverting to the previous release is displayed.
Note Table 6-126 lists the Ethernet variables supported on Ports 1 and 3 of the OTU2_XP card that has the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy enabled. When the card is in the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, no 10G FC RMONS are supported on Ports 2 and 4.
For more information on OTU2_XP card configuration rules, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 6 Click Apply. Then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM
Purpose
|
This task provisions a multirate PPM on a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note If the PPM was preprovisioned using the "DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot" task this task is unnecessary, unless the PPM has an Out-of-Service and Autonomous Management, Unassigned (OOS-AUMA,UAS) (ANSI) or unlocked-disabled, unassigned (ETSI) service state.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you want to provision PPM settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
•PPM—Choose the PPM slot number where the SFP is installed from the drop-down list.
•PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 6 If you want to provision a PPM on another port, repeat Steps 3 through 5. If not, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services
Purpose
|
This task verifies that the DWDM network topology can support the IBM ETR_CLO and ISC services.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
Cisco TransportPlanner site plan
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Display your site plan in Cisco TransportPlanner.
Step 2 Verify that the topology where you plan to run the ETR_CLO or ISC service can support the service. The following topologies support ETR_CLO or ISC:
•Single span—Two terminal sites with no intermediate sites in between and one of the following sets of cards installed:
–32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
–32WSS and 32DMX cards
–32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
–40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
–40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Figure 6-1 shows a single-span topology as displayed in Cisco Transport Planner.
Figure 6-1 Single-Span Topology
•Point-to-Point—Two terminal sites with one of the following sets of cards installed:
–32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
–32WSS and 32DMX cards
–32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
–40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
–40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Line amplifiers can be installed between the terminal sites, but intermediate (traffic terminating) sites cannot be installed. Figure 6-2 shows a point-to-point topology as shown in Cisco TransportPlanner.
Figure 6-2 Point-to-Point Topology
•Two hubs—Two hub nodes in a ring with one of the following sets of cards installed:
–32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
–32WSS and 32DMX cards
–32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
–40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
–40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Line amplifiers can be installed between the hubs. Figure 6-3 shows two hub nodes with no line amplifier nodes installed. Figure 6-4 shows two hub nodes with line amplifier nodes installed.
Figure 6-3 Hubs with No Line Amplifiers
Figure 6-4 Hubs with Line Amplifiers
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
Note The optical line rate for cards with single-rate PPMs is provisioned automatically when you complete the "DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM" task if the trunk port is out of service. If the optical line rate was provisioned automatically, you do not need to complete this task for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card. If the trunk port was in-service when you provisioned the PPM, complete this task to provision the optical line rate manually for those cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card where you want to provision PPM ports. If the data rate that you are provisioning is DV-6000, HDTV, ESCON, SDI/D1 Video, ISC1, ISC3 (for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards), or ETR_CLO, complete the following steps. Otherwise, continue with Step 4.
a. Click the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tabs.
b. In the ITU-T G.709 OTN field for the respective PPM, choose Disable.
c. In the FEC field for the respective PPM, choose Disable.
d. Click Apply.
Step 2 For the TXP_MR-10G card, click the Provisioning > Data Rate Selection tabs. For all other cards, go to Step 4.
Step 3 In the Data Rate Selection area, click Create and choose the type of port from the drop-down list. The supported port types are SONET (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy) and 10G Ethernet LAN Phy.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 5 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Port dialog box appears.
Step 6 In the Create Port dialog box, complete the following:
•Port—Choose the port and port number from the drop-down list. The first number indicates the PPM in the Pluggable Port Modules area, and the second number indicates the port number on the PPM. For example, the first PPM with one port appears as 1-1 and the second PPM with one port appears as 2-1. The PPM number can be 1 to 4, but the port number is always 1.
•Port Type—Choose the type of port from the drop-down list. The port type list displays the supported port rates on your PPM. See Table 6-3 for definitions of the supported rates on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card.
Step 7 Click OK. The row in the Pluggable Ports area turns white if the physical SFP is installed and light blue if the SFP is not installed.
If the optical parameter values differ from the NE Default settings, change the port state to In-Service (for ANSI) or Unlocked (for ETSI) to synchronize the values with the NE Default settings.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 5 through 7 to configure the rest of the port rates as needed.
Table 6-3 PPM Port Types
Card
|
Port Type
|
TXP_MR_2.5G
TXPP_MR_2.5G
|
•OC-3/STM1—155 Mbps
•OC-12/STM4—622 Mbps
•OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps
•ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps
•ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM signal)
•DV6000—Proprietary signal from video vendor
•SDI_D1_VIDEO—Serial Digital Interface and Digital Video signal type 1
•HDTV—High Definition Television
•PASS-THRU—Not specified
•FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps
•FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps
•FICON1G—Fiber connectivity1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
•FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal)
•ETR_CLO—External Time Reference-Control Link Oscillator
•ISC compat—InterSystem Coupling Link 1 (ISC1)
•ISC peer—InterSystem Coupling Link 3 (ISC3)
•DVB-ASI — Proprietary signal from video vendor. Digital Video Broadcast - Asynchronous Serial Interface
•ISC1— InterSystem Channel 1 Gbps (IBM signal)
|
MXP_2.5G_10G
MXP_2.5G_10E
MXP_2.5G_10E_C
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
|
•OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps1
|
TXP_MR_10G2
|
•SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
•10G Ethernet LAN Phy
|
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
|
•SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy—10 Gbps
•10G Ethernet LAN Phy—10 Gbps Ethernet
•10G Fibre Channel—10 Gbps Fibre Channel
•(TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G
|
MXP_MR_2.5G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
|
If the card mode is FC_GE:
•FC1G ISL—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Ports 1-1 and 2-1)
•FC2G ISL—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
•FICON1G ISL—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1 and 2-1)
•FICON2G ISL—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal) (Port 1-1 only)
•ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1 and 2-1 only)
If the card mode is Mixed:
•FC1G ISL—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
•FICON1G ISL—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal) (Port1-1 only)
•ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
•ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM signal) (Ports 5-1 through 8-1)
If the card mode is ESCON:
•ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
|
MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
|
If the port mode is FC_GE_ISC:
•FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
•FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
•FICON1G—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal) FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
•ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
•ISC COMPAT (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
•ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
•ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
If the port mode is FC4G:
•FC4G—Fibre Channel 4.25 Gbps (Ports 1-1 or 5-1 only; ports are not available if any of the three ports that follow has a PPM provisioned.)
•FICON4G—Fiber connectivity 4.25 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1 or 5-1 only; ports are not available if any of the three ports that follow has a PPM provisioned.)
|
40G-MXP-C
|
•SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64)
•FC8G
•FC10G
•TEN_GE
•OTU2
|
GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
|
•GE_XP and GE_XPE client ports1
•10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE client and trunk ports; GE_XP and GE_XPE trunk ports1
|
OTU2_XP
|
•SONET (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)—10 Gbps
•10G Ethernet LAN Phy—10 Gbps Ethernet
•10G Fiber Channel—10 Gbps Fibre Channel
•IB_5G—InfiniBand 5 Gbps
Note If you have an OTU2 signal in which the OPU2 has been generated by multiplexing four ODU1 signals, choose SONET as the port rate. This allows the OTU2 signal to be transported transparently in standard or E-FEC regenerator configuration.
|
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G280 Delete a PPM
Note Before deleting a PPM, delete the PPM from the provisioning pane.
Note This task does not apply to the TXP_MR_10G card. To change the TXP_MR_10G data rate, complete the "DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate" task.
Note You cannot delete a PPM if the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card is part of a regenerator group. For OTU2_XP card, you cannot delete a PPM if the card configuration is in Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC mode.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you want to delete PPM settings.
Step 2 Verify that the PPM port Service State is OOS,DSBLD. If the PPM port is OOS,DSBLD, go to Step 3. If it is not OOS,DSBLD, follow the tasks in G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules, to change the Service State of the PPM port to OOS,DSBLD.
Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 4 To delete a PPM and the associated ports:
a. In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click the PPM that you want to delete. The highlight changes to dark blue.
b. Click Delete. The Delete PPM dialog box appears.
c. Click Yes. The PPM provisioning is removed from the Pluggable Port Modules area and the Pluggable Ports area.
Note You cannot delete a PPM until its port is in the OOS,DSBLD state. You cannot delete a client port if the client is in the In Service and Normal (IS-NR) (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI) service state, is in a protection group, has a generic communications channel (GCC) or data communications channel (DCC), is a timing source, has circuits or overhead circuits, or transports Link Management Protocol channels or links. You can delete a client port (except the last port) if the trunk port is in service and the client port is in the OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state. You can delete the last client port only if the trunk port is in a OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state for all cards except the MXP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards. For more information about port states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 5 Verify that the PPM provisioning is deleted:
•In the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card view, CTC shows an empty port after the PPM is deleted.
•If the SFP or XFP is physically present when you delete the PPM provisioning, CTC transitions to the deleted state, the ports (if any) are deleted, and the PPM is represented as a gray graphic in CTC. The SFP or XFP can be provisioned again in CTC, or the equipment can be removed. If the equipment is removed, the graphic disappears.
Step 6 If you need to remove the PPM hardware (the SFP or XFP), complete the "DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP" task.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group
Purpose
|
This procedure creates a Y-cable protection group between the client ports of two TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards. For additional information about Y-cable protection, see the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
Installed TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card
Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
"NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards" in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
"NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment" in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
G46 Log into CTC
G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note Y-cable protection is available for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when they are provisioned in 10GE MXP, 20GE MXP, or 10GE TXP mode. Y-cable protection cannot be provisioned for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when they are provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode. Y-cable protection is available for the OTU2_XP card when it is provisioned in the TXP card mode. Y-cable protection is not supported on IB_5G.
Note If you are provisioning Y-cable protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, the Ethernet mode must be set to 1000 and 10000 Mbps respectively. To provision the Ethernet mode, see the "DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings" task.
Note There is a traffic hit of upto a couple hundred milliseconds on the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXP_MR_10DME cards in Y-cable configuration when a fiber cut or SFP failure occurs on one of the client ports.
Note For SONET or SDH payloads, Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) alarms can occur on a split signal if the ports are not in a Y-cable protection group.
Step 1 View the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix (see Table 4-1) for your site. Verify the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards that need Y-cable protection groups. (Cards requiring Y-cable protection are indicated with "Y-Cable" in the Traffic Matrix table Protection Type column. Refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner DWDM Operations Guide for more information.)
Step 2 Verify that the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards are installed according to the requirements specified in Table 4-6. Table 6-4 lists the protection types available in the ONS 15454 for DWDM client cards.
Table 6-4 Protection Types
Protection Type
|
Cards
|
Description and Installation Requirements
|
Y-cable
|
MXP_2.5_10G
MXP_2.5_10E
MXP_2.5_10E_C
MXP_2.5_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
TXP_MR_10G
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_2.5G
MXP_MR_2.5G
MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
40G-MXP-C
GE_XP1
10GE_XP2
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
OTU2_XP
|
Pairs a working transponder or muxponder card or port with a protect transponder or muxponder card or port. The protect port must be on a different card than the working port and it must be the same card type as the working port. The working and protect port numbers must be the same, that is, Port 1 can only protect Port 1, Port 2 can only protect Port 2, and so on.
Note Working and Protect card must be in the same shelf for a multishelf node.
|
Splitter
|
TXPP_MR_2.5G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
|
A splitter protection group is automatically created when a TXPP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card is installed. You can edit the splitter protection group name.
|
OTU2_XP
|
A splitter protection group is configurable for the OTU2_XP card. You can create a splitter protection group on Ports 3 and 4 of the OTU2_XP card using the "NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card" procedure.
|
1+1
|
GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
|
In the Layer 2 (L2) card mode 1+1 protection is provided to protect the card against client port and card failure.
|
Step 3 Verify that pluggable ports are provisioned for the same payload and payload rate on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards where you will create the Y-cable protection group:
a. Display the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module tab.
c. Verify that a pluggable port is provisioned in the Pluggable Port Module area, and the payload type and rate is provisioned for it in the Pluggable Ports area. If they are not the same, for example, if the pluggable port and rate are not the same, you must either delete the provisioned rate and create a new rate to match using the "DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot" task or replace the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) using the "DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP" task.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.
Step 5 In the Protection Groups area, click Create.
Step 6 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
•Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark (?), backslash (\), or double quote (") characters.
•Type—Choose Y Cable from the drop-down list.
•Protect Port—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port to the active port. The list displays the available transponder or muxponder ports. If transponder or muxponder cards are not installed, no ports appear in the drop-down list.
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Ports list. If no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you can not complete this task until you install the physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the "DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot" task.
Step 7 From the Available Ports list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in Protect Ports. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Ports list.
Step 8 Complete the remaining fields:
•Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
•Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions causing the switch are cleared.
Note The Bidirectional switching option is available for Y-cable protection groups only in the following cases:
•On the MXP_MR_10DME card when ISC3_PEER_1G/ISC3_PEER_2G is the client payload.
•On the MXP_MR_10DME and MXP_MR_2.5G cards when Fibre Channel is the client payload. In this case Bidirectional switching is:
–Automatically enabled when Distance Extension is enabled.
–Automatically disabled when Distance Extension is disabled.
The Bidirectional switching option is available for all SONET and SDH 1+1 protection groups.
Step 9 Click OK.
Step 10 Repeat this procedure for every Y-cable protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card
Purpose
|
This procedure creates a splitter protection group between the trunk ports of an OTU2_XP card. For additional information about splitter protection, see the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
Installed OTU2_XP card
Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
"NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards" in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
"NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment" in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
G46 Log into CTC
G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note A splitter protection group is automatically created when a TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, or PSM card is installed. You can edit the splitter protection group name for these cards. The splitter protection group is deleted when you delete the TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, or PSM card.
Note Splitter protection is available for the OTU2_XP card when it is provisioned in Transponder configuration only. In a splitter-protected Transponder configuration, Port 1 is the client port, Port 3 is the working trunk port, and Port 4 is the standby trunk port.
Note For SONET or SDH payloads, Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) alarms can occur on a split signal if the ports are not in a splitter protection group.
Step 1 View the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix (see Table 4-1) for your site. Verify which OTU2_XP card needs a splitter protection group. (Cards requiring splitter protection are indicated with "Splitter" in the Traffic Matrix table Protection Type column. Refer to the Cisco TransportPlanner DWDM Operations Guide for more information.)
Step 2 Verify that the OTU2_XP card is installed according to the requirements specified in Table 4-6.
Step 3 Verify that the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is provisioned for the same payload rate as the pluggable port on the OTU2_XP card where you will create the splitter protection group:
a. Display the OTU2_XP card in card view.
b. Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module tabs.
c. Verify that a pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is provisioned in the Pluggable Port Module area, and that the payload rate of the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is same as the payload rate of the pluggable port on the OTU2_XP card provisioned in the Pluggable Ports area. If they are not the same, you must either delete the provisioned rate and create a new rate to match using the "DLP-G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot" task or replace the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) using the "DLP-G64 Remove an SFP or XFP" task.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.
Step 5 In the Protection Groups area, click Create.
Step 6 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
•Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark (?), backslash (\), or double quote (") characters.
•Type—Choose Splitter from the drop-down list.
•Protect Card—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port to the active port. The list displays the available OTU2_XP ports. If transponder or muxponder cards are not installed or if the trunk ports of the card are part of a regenerator group, no ports appear in the drop-down list.
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Cards list. If no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you cannot complete this task until you install the physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the "DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot" task.
Step 7 From the Available Cards list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in Protect Cards. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Cards list.
Step 8 Complete the remaining fields:
•Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
•Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions causing the switch are cleared.
Note The Bidirectional Switching option is not applicable for splitter protection groups.
Step 9 Click OK.
Step 10 Repeat this procedure for every splitter protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Purpose
|
This procedure creates a 1+1 protection group to protect against client port and card failure of GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE cards. For additional information about 1+1 protection, see the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
"NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards" in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
"NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment" in the Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task at the node where you want to protect the card against client port and card failure. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed according to the requirements specified in Table 4-6.
Step 3 Complete the G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually by selecting the Trunk to Trunk (L2) option, at the trunk port where you want to create 1+1 protection.
Step 4 Complete the "DLP-G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards" task to create a protection group.
Step 5 Configure the standby port behavior, by setting the Protection Action to None or Squelch. For detailed information on how to configure the standby port behavior, see the, "DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings" task.
Note Do not enable squelch in a 1 + 1 protection group, if the 100FX, 100LX, and ONS-SE-ZE-EL SFP are used in the protection group and is connected to the peer via the parallel cable (not Y-cable).
Note When you configure L2 1 + 1 protection on 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards, set the Protection Action to None on the client ports. Setting the Protection Action as Squelch results in unexpected switching behavior.
Step 6 Configure the standby and active port speed, by setting the mode parameter to Auto or 1000 or any other values. For detailed information on how to configure the standby port behavior, see the "DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings" task.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Purpose
|
This procedure creates a 1+1 protection group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE slots where internal patchcords were created.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.
Step 2 In the Protection Groups area, click Create.
Step 3 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
•Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark (?), backslash (\), or double quote (") characters.
•Type—Choose L2 1+1 (port) from the drop-down list.
•Protect Port—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port for the active port. The list displays the available transponder or muxponder ports. If transponder or muxponder cards are not installed, no ports appear in the drop-down list.
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Ports list. If no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you cannot complete this task until you install the physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the "DLP-G353 Preprovision a Slot" task.
Step 4 From the Available Ports list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in the Protected Port drop-down list. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Ports list.
Step 5 Complete the remaining fields:
•Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
•Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions causing the switch are cleared.
The bidirectional switching option is available for SONET and SDH 1+1 protection groups.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Repeat this procedure for every 1+1 protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task at the node where you want to change the transponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the "NTP-G103 Back Up the Database" procedure to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
•G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
•G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
•G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
•G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings
•G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
•G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
•G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
•G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
•G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the card settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-5.
Note The Card subtab Framing Type and Tunable Wavelengths fields are display-only. Framing Type shows the card framing type, either SONET or SDH, depending on whether the card is installed in an ANSI or ETSI chassis. The Tunable Wavelengths field shows the tunable wavelengths for the physical TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G that is installed.
Table 6-5 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Termination Mode
|
Sets the mode of operation (option only supported for SONET/SDH payloads). Refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual for more details.
|
•Transparent
•Section (ANSI) or Regeneration Section (ETSI)
•Line (ANSI) or Multiplex Section (ETSI)
|
Regeneration Peer Slot
|
Sets the slot containing another TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card to create a regeneration peer group. A regeneration peer group facilitates the management of two TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G cards that are needed to perform a complete signal regeneration.
The regeneration peer group synchronizes provisioning of the two cards. Payload type and ITU-T G.709 optical transport network (OTN) changes made on one TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card are reflected on the peer TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card.
Note Y-cable protection groups cannot be created on TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G cards that are in a regeneration peer group.
|
•None
•1
•2
•3
•4
•5
•6
•12
•13
•14
•15
•16
•17
|
Regeneration Group Name
|
Sets the regeneration peer group name.
|
User defined
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for the client port of the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-6.
Note The 2.5G multirate transponder trunk settings are provisioned in the "DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds" task.
Table 6-6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
•1
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G card only)
|
Port Name
|
The user can assign a logical name for each of the ports shown by filling in this field.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
•IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
•OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
SF BER
|
(OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-3
•1E-4
•1E-5
|
SD BER
|
(OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
|
•Disabled (default)
•Auto Restart
•Manual Restart
•Manual Restart for Test
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
Options: ANSI/ETSI
•Autoprovision/Autoprovision (default)
•SR
•SR 1/I-1—Short reach up to 2-km distance
•IR 1/S1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km distance
•IR 2/S2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km distance
•LR 1/L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance
•LR 2/L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance
•LR 3/L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance
|
Wavelength
|
Displays the wavelength of the client port.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths: 1310 nm through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked by asterisks (**)
|
AINS Soak
|
(OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
Type
|
(OC-N and STM-N payloads only) The optical transport type.
|
•SONET
•SDH
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the section trace settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note This task only applies to SONET services.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-7.
Table 6-7 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Section Trace
Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
•1
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
•Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
•1 byte
•16 byte
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this display updated automatically.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-8.
Table 6-8 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
|
Wavelength
|
The wavelength provisioned for the trunk.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T, C-band spacing. If the card is installed, the wavelengths it carries are identified with two asterisks. Other wavelengths have a dark grey background. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in Table 6-9.
Note Some parameters and options in Table 6-9 do not apply to all TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. If a parameter or option does not apply, that parameter or option does not appear in CTC.
Table 6-9 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Thresholds Settings
for OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Payloads
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options - ANSI
|
Options - ETSI
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
•1
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
|
•1
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
SEFS
|
(Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line remote monitoring (RMON) threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying the 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In card view, display the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 6-10 for a list of available Ethernet variables.
Table 6-10 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card 1G Ethernet and 1G FC/FICON
Thresholds
Variable
|
Description
|
ifInErrors
|
Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of received packets.
|
8b10bStatsEncodingDispErrors
|
Number of IETF 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel line side.
|
8b10bIdleOrderedSets
|
Number of received packets containing idle ordered sets.
|
8b10bNonIdleOrderedSets
|
Number of received packets containing non-idle ordered sets.
|
8b10bDataOrderedSets
|
Number of received packets containing data ordered sets.
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Enter the appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G trunk port alarm and threshold crossing alert (TCA) thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note In this task, trunk port refers to Port 2 for TXP_MR_2.5G cards, and to Ports 2 and 3 for TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Pluggable Port Modules tab. Under Pluggable Ports, record the Rate that is provisioned.
Step 3 Look up the rate in Table 6-11 and note whether it is 2R or 3R.
Table 6-11 2R and 3R Mode and ITU-T G.709 Compliance by Client Interface
Client Interface
|
Input Bit Rate
|
3R vs. 2R
|
ITU-T G.709
|
OC-48/STM-16
|
2.488 Gbps
|
3R
|
On or Off
|
DV-6000
|
2.38 Gbps
|
2R
|
—
|
2 Gigabit Fibre Channel (2G-FC)/fiber connectivity (FICON)
|
2.125 Gbps
|
3R1
|
On or Off
|
High-Definition Television (HDTV)
|
1.48 Gbps
|
2R
|
—
|
Gigabit Ethernet (GE)
|
1.25 Gbps
|
3R
|
On or Off
|
1 Gigabit Fibre Channel (1G-FC)/FICON
|
1.06 Gbps
|
3R
|
On or Off
|
OC-12/STM-4
|
622 Mbps
|
3R
|
On or Off
|
OC-3/STM-1
|
155 Mbps
|
3R
|
On or Off
|
Enterprise System Connection (ESCON)
|
200 Mbps
|
2R
|
—
|
SDI/D1 video
|
270 Mbps
|
2R
|
—
|
ISC-1 Compact
|
1.06 Gbps
|
3R
|
Off
|
ISC-3
|
1.06 or 2.125 Gbps
|
2R
|
—
|
ETR_CLO
|
16 Mbps
|
2R
|
—
|
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 5 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 6-12, verify the trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High and RX Power Low depending on whether the rate is 2R or 3R. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-12 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Signal
|
TCA RX Power Low
|
TCA RX Power High
|
3R
|
-23 dBm
|
-9 dBm
|
2R
|
-24 dBm
|
-9 dBm
|
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 9 Verify the trunk port Alarm thresholds for RX Power High is -7 dBm, and for RX Power Low is -26 dBm. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 10 Click Apply.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 6-13, verify the Port 1 (client) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 6-13 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
|
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
OC-3
|
15454-SFP3-1-IR
|
-23
|
-8
|
-21
|
-2
|
STM-1
|
15454E-SFP-L.1.1
|
-24
|
-10
|
-21
|
-2
|
OC-12
|
15454-SFP12-4-IR
|
-28
|
-7
|
-21
|
-2
|
STM-4
|
15454E-SFP-L.4.1
|
-28
|
-8
|
-21
|
-2
|
OC-48
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
-18
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
-18
|
0
|
-11
|
6
|
STM-16
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
-18
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
ONE_GE
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
ESCON
|
15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
-21
|
-14
|
-35
|
-8
|
DV6000
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
-18
|
0
|
-11
|
6
|
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
-18
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
SDI_D1_ VIDEO
|
15454-SFP12-4-IR
|
-28
|
-7
|
-21
|
-2
|
15454E-SFP-L.4.1
|
-28
|
-8
|
-21
|
-2
|
HDTV
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
PASS-THRU
|
2R MODE
(not specified)
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-15
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-15
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
ETR_CLO
|
15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
ISC compat
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
ISC peer
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 6-14, verify the Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Table 6-14 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
|
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
OC-3
|
15454-SFP3-1-IR
|
-26
|
-5
|
-17
|
-6
|
STM-1
|
15454E-SFP-L.1.1
|
-27
|
-7
|
-17
|
-6
|
OC-12
|
15454-SFP12-4-IR
|
-31
|
-4
|
-17
|
-6
|
STM-4
|
15454E-SFP-L.4.1
|
-31
|
-5
|
-17
|
-6
|
OC-48
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
-21
|
0
|
-12
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
-21
|
3
|
-7
|
2
|
STM-16
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
-21
|
0
|
-12
|
-1
|
ONE_GE
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-12
|
-2
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-12
|
-1
|
ESCON
|
15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
-24
|
-11
|
-31
|
-12
|
DV6000
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
-21
|
3
|
-7
|
2
|
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
-21
|
0
|
-12
|
-5
|
SDI_D1_ VIDEO
|
15454-SFP12-4-IR
|
-31
|
-4
|
-17
|
-6
|
15454E-SFP-L.4.1
|
-31
|
-5
|
-17
|
-6
|
HDTV
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-12
|
-1
|
PASS-THRU
|
2R MODE
(not specified)
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-12
|
-2
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-12
|
-1
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-18
|
3
|
-12
|
-2
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-12
|
-1
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-12
|
-2
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-12
|
-1
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-18
|
3
|
-12
|
-2
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-12
|
-1
|
ETR_CLO
|
15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
-20
|
3
|
-12
|
-2
|
ISC compat
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-12
|
-1
|
ISC peer
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-12
|
-1
|
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the OTN settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-15 through 6-18.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM settings independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-15 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 6-15 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
G.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709.
|
•Enable
•Disable
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN lines to forward error correction (FEC).
|
•Enable
•Disable
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) The signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
Table 6-16 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-16 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port1
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
Table 6-17 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 6-17 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Sets the value for bit errors corrected.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Sets the value for uncorrectable words.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Table 6-18 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-18 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
•2 (Trunk)
•3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
•Section
•Path
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Disable FDI on TIM
|
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
•Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 minutes.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Purpose
|
This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for 10G multirate transponder cards including the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards
G63 Install an SFP or XFP
G277 Provision a Multirate PPM (if necessary)
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate (if necessary)
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The TXP_MR_10G card does not support PPMs.
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task at the node where you want to change the transponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the "NTP-G103 Back Up the Database" procedure to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 If you are provisioning a TXP_MR_10G card, complete the "DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate" task, and if you are provisioning a TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C card, complete the "DLP-G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate" task. If not, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
•G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
•G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
•G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
•G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
•G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy Payloads
•G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
•G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
•G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
•G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate
Purpose
|
This task changes the TXP_MR_10G card data rate.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G card where you want to change the card data rate settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Data Rate Selection tabs.
Step 3 Click Create.
Step 4 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates:
•SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)
•10G Ethernet LAN Phy
Step 5 Click Ok.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure.
DLP-G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate
Purpose
|
This task changes the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C card data rate.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the card data rate settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
•PPM—Choose the SFP you want to install from the drop-down list.
•PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Step 6 Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 7 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Ports dialog box appears.
Step 8 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates:
•SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)
•10G Ethernet LAN Phy
•10G FIBER Channel
•(TXP-MR-10EX_C card only) IB_5G
Step 9 Click Ok.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure.
DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the card settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-19.
Table 6-19 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 Options
|
ONS 15454 SDH Options
|
Termination Mode
|
Sets the mode of operation. (This option is only available for SONET/SDH payloads). Refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual for more details.
|
•Transparent
•Section (TXP_MR_10E only)
•Line
|
•Transparent
•Regeneration Section (TXP_MR_10E only)
•Multiplex Section
|
AIS/Squelch
Configuration
|
(TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C only) Sets the transparent termination mode configuration.
|
•Squelch
•AIS
|
•Squelch
•AIS
|
Regeneration Peer Slot
|
Sets the slot containing another TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card to create a regeneration peer group. A regeneration peer group facilitates the management of two TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C cards that are needed to perform a complete signal regeneration.
The regeneration peer group synchronizes provisioning of the two cards. Payload type and ITU-T G.709 optical transport network (OTN) changes made on one TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card are reflected on the peer TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card.
Note Y-cable protection groups cannot be created on TXP cards that are in a regeneration peer group.
|
•None
•1
•2
•3
•4
•5
•6
•12
•13
•14
•15
•16
•17
|
•None
•1
•2
•3
•4
•5
•6
•12
•13
•14
•15
•16
•17
|
Regeneration Group Name
|
(Display only) The regeneration peer group name.
|
—
|
—
|
Tunable Wavelengths
|
(Display only) Shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed. For the TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L cards, the first and last supported wavelength, frequency spacing, and number of supported wavelengths are shown in the format: first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths. For example, the TXP_MR_10E_C card would show: 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82. The TXP_MR_10E show the four wavelengths supported by the card that is installed. The TXP_MR_10G show the two wavelengths supported by the card that is installed.
|
—
|
—
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET/SDH/Ethernet tabs. SONET is the option for ANSI shelves when 10G Ethernet WAN phy is the Pluggable Port Rate, SDH is the option for ETSI shelves when 10G Ethernet WAN phy is the Pluggable Port Rate, and Ethernet is the option for ANSI or ETSI shelves when 10GE LAN Phy is the Pluggable Port Rate.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-20.
Note In Table 6-20, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all 10G multirate transponder cards. If a tab does not apply, it will not appear in CTC.
Table 6-20 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
•1 (OC192) (10G Ethernet WAN Phy) (if TXP_MR_10G)
•1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10G card)
•1-1 (OC192) (10G Ethernet WAN Phy on the TXP_MR_10E card)
•1-1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E card)
•1-1 (FC10G) (if 10G fiber channel is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E card)
•2 (Trunk)
•(TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G
|
•1 (STM-64) (10G Ethernet WAN Phy) (if TXP_MR_10G)
•1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10G card)
•1-1 (STM-64) (10G Ethernet WAN Phy on the TXP_MR_10E card)
•1-1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E card)
•1-1 (FC10G) (if 10G fiber channel is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E card)
•2 (Trunk)
•(TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state. For more information about administrative states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS
•IS,AINS
•OOS,DSBLD
•OOS,MT
|
•Unlocked
•Unlocked,automaticInService
•Locked,disabled
•Locked,maintenance
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR
•OOS-AU,AINS
•OOS-MA,DSBLD
•OOS-MA,MT
|
•Unlocked-enabled
•Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
•Locked-enabled,disabled
•Locked-enabled,maintenance
|
SF BER
|
(SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-3
•1E-4
•1E-5
|
•1E-3
•1E-4
•1E-5
|
SD BER
|
(SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
Type
|
(SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) The optical transport type.
|
•SONET
•SDH
|
•SONET
•SDH
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled, or it can be set for one of three mode options.
|
•Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
•Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
• Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
(SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
ProvidesSync
|
(TXP_MR_10E, OC192 only) Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as a network element (NE) timing reference.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SyncMsgIn
|
(TXP_MR_10E, OC192 only) Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Max Size
|
(TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10G LAN Phy only) Sets the maximum Ethernet packet size.
|
•1548 bytes
•Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
|
•1548 bytes
•Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
|
Incoming MAC Address
|
(TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10G LAN Phy only) Sets the incoming MAC address.
|
Value of MAC address. Six bytes in hexadecimal format.
|
Value of MAC address. Six bytes in hexadecimal format.
|
Wavelength
|
Displays the wavelength of the client port.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths: 1310 nm through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked by asterisks (**)
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths: 1310 nm through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked by asterisks (**)
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected.
|
The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line section trace settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The Section Trace tab is available for the 10G Multirate Transponder cards only if no PPMs are provisioned, or the OC192 PPM is provisioned. The tab is not available if a 10G Ethernet LAN Phy or 10G Fibre Channel PPM is provisioned.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-21.
Table 6-21 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Section Trace Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 Options
|
Options — ONS 15454 SDH
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
•1-1 (OC192)
•2—Trunk
|
•1-1 (STM64)
•2—Trunk
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
•1 byte
•16 byte
|
•1 byte
•16 byte
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
•Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
•Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
•Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note Before modifying the wavelength settings, change the port state to OOS,DSBLD (for ANSI) or Locked,disabled (for ETSI) and delete the circuit and patchcord provisioning present on the port. Payload or communication channel provisioning can be retained.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-22.
Table 6-22 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
Port 2 (Trunk)
|
Band
|
Indicates the wavelength band that can be provisioned. If the physical TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C is installed, this field is display-only.
|
•C—The C-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
•L—The L-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
|
Even/Odd
|
Sets the wavelengths available for provisioning for TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L cards. (This field does not apply to TXP_MR_10G or TXP_MR_10E cards.)
|
•Even—Displays even C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
•Odd—Displays odd C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
|
Wavelength
|
The wavelength provisioned for the trunk.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T C-band or L-band spacing, depending on the card that is installed. For TXP_MR_10G and TXP_MR_10E cards, the wavelengths carried by the card are identified with two asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards carrying SONET or SDH payloads, including the physical 10G Ethernet WAN Phy payload.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-23.
Note Parameters shown in Table 6-23 do not apply to all 10G multirate transponder cards. If the parameter or option does not apply, it is not shown in CTC.
Table 6-23 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options - ANSI
|
Options - ETSI
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
•1-1 (OC192)
•2 (Trunk)
|
•1-1 (STM64)
•2 (Trunk)
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SEFS
|
(Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
OFS
|
(Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Out of frame seconds
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
UAS
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards carrying the physical 10G Ethernet LAN payload.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Display the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 6-24 for a list of available Ethernet variables.
Table 6-24 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card GE LAN Phy Variables
Variable
|
Description
|
ifInOctets
|
Total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of received packets.
|
ifInMulticastPkts
|
Number of multicast frames received error free.
|
ifInBroadcastPkts
|
Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to an higher sublayer, that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer.
|
ifInErrors
|
Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
|
ifInErrorBytePkts (TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Number of receive error bytes.
|
ifInFramingErrorPkts (TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Number of receive framing error counters.
|
ifInJunkInterPkts (TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Number of receive interpacket junk counters.
|
ifOutOctets
(TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Total number of transmit packets.
|
ifOutMulticastPkts (TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Number of multicast frames transmitted error free.
|
ifOutBroadcastPkts (TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
|
dot3StatsFCSErrors
|
Number of frames with frame check errors, that is, there is an integral number of octets, but an incorrect Frame Check Sequence (FCS).
|
dot3StatsFrameTooLong (TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Number of received frames that were larger than the maximum size permitted.
|
etherStatsUndersizePkts
|
Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
|
etherStatsFragments
|
Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error). Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
|
etherStatsPkts64Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets
|
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsBroadcastPkts
|
Total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.
|
etherStatsMulticastPkts
|
Total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
|
etherStatsOversizePkts
|
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
|
etherStatsJabbers
|
Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
|
etherStatsOctets
|
Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors (TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
|
rxPauseFrames
(TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Number of received IETF 802.x pause frames.
|
rxControlFrames
|
Number of MAC control frames passed by the MAC sublayer to the MAC control sublayer.
|
rxUnknownOpcodeFrames (TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Number of MAC control frames received that contain an opcode that is not supported by the device.
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C trunk port alarm and threshold cross alert (TCA) thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-25, verify the trunk port (Port 2) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter, then click Apply.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 6-25 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Card
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
TXP_MR_10G
|
-8 dBm
|
-18 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
-1 dBm
|
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
|
-9 dBm
|
-18 dBm
|
9 dBm
|
0 dBm
|
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-26, verify the trunk port (Port 2) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter, then click Apply.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-26 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Card
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
TXP_MR_10G
|
-8 dBm
|
-20 dBm
|
4 dBm
|
2 dBm
|
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
|
-8 dBm
|
-20 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
3 dBm
|
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-27, verify the Port 1 (Client) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter, then click Apply.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 6-27 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Pluggable Port Rate
|
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
SONET (or SDH)
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
|
-1
|
-11
|
-1
|
-6
|
10G Ethernet LAN Phy
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
|
0.5
|
-14.4
|
-1
|
-6
|
10G Fibre Channel
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
|
0.5
|
-14.4
|
-1
|
-6
|
IB_5G1
|
TXP_MR_10EX_C uses ONS-XC-10G-S1 Version 3
|
1.0
|
-14.0
|
5.0
|
12.0
|
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-28, provision the Port 1 (Client) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-28 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
Pluggable Port Rate
|
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
SONET (or SDH)
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
|
3
|
-16
|
1
|
-8
|
10G Ethernet LAN Phy
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
|
3
|
-16
|
1
|
-8
|
10G Fibre Channel
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
|
3
|
-16
|
1
|
-8
|
IB_5G1
|
TXP_MR_10EX_C uses ONS-XC-10G-S1 Version 3
|
3.0
|
-16
|
1.0
|
-8
|
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line OTN settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-29 through 6-32.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-29 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 6-29 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card OTN Lines Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
2
|
G.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709. Check the box to enable. For TXP-MR-10EX_C cards, the G.709 OTN should be enabled.
|
•Enable
•Disable
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. FEC mode can be Disabled, Enabled, or, for the TXP_MR_10E, Enhanced FEC mode can be enabled to provide greater range and lower bit error rate. For TXP_MR_10E cards, Standard is the same as enabling FEC. For TXP-MR-10EX_C cards, the FEC should be enabled.
|
•Enable—(TXP_MR_10G only) FEC is on.
•Disable—FEC is off.
•Standard—(TXP_MR_10E only) Standard FEC is on.
•Enhanced—(TXP_MR_10E only) Enhanced FEC is on.
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
|
Asynch/Synch Mapping
|
(TXP_MR_10E only) Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
|
•Asynch mapping
•Synch mapping
|
Table 6-30 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-30 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
2
|
ES
|
Severely errored seconds. Two types of thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC, overhead management, and PM using OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button selects path PM using ODUk.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel transport unit order of k overhead frame used for management and performance monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel data unit order of k overhead frame unit used for path performance monitoring.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Table 6-31 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 6-31 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
2
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Displays the number of bit errors corrected during the selected time period.
|
Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Displays the number of uncorrectable words in the selected time period.
|
Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Table 6-32 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-32 10G Multirate Transponder Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
•1
•2
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
•Section
•Path
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Disable FDI on TTIM
|
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to the downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
•Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not disabled)
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 minutes.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task at the node where you want to change the ADM-10G card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the "NTP-G103 Back Up the Database" procedure to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 To provision a peer group, complete the "DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group" task.
Step 4 To provision Ethernet settings, complete the "DLP-G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings" task.
Step 5 To change line settings, complete the following tasks as needed:
•G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings
•G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings
•G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads
•G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload
Step 6 To change thresholds, complete the following tasks as needed:
•G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
•G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
•G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group
Note You cannot perform this task on a single ADM-10G card; it is only available if a second ADM-10G card can be accessed through the interlink ports (Port 17 and Port 18).
Note Due to a hardware limitation, you cannot provision the SDCC/LDCC on Port 17.
Note Perform this task on only one of the two peer cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 In the ADM Group Peer drop-down list, choose the slot number (for example, 14) where the companion ADM-10G card is located.
Step 4 In the ADM Peer Group field, enter a group name.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Note The Card Parameters Tunable Wavelengths area is read-only and does not contain any wavelengths until circuits are separately provisioned for the card.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the Ethernet settings for the ADM-10G card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the Ethernet settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ethernet tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Ethernet tab as described in Table 6-33. The parameters that appear depend on the card mode.
Table 6-33 ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) The Port number (n-n) and rate.
|
—
|
MTU
|
The maximum size of the Ethernet frames accepted by the port.
|
Jumbo. Default: 64 to 9216
Numeric: 1548
|
Mode
|
Sets the Ethernet mode.
|
1000 Mbps
|
Framing
|
Sets the framing type.
|
•GFP-F
•HDLC
|
CRC Encap
|
Sets the CRC encap values for the framing
type.
|
CRC encap value for GFP-F:
•None (default)
•32-Bit
CRC encap value for HDLC:
•16-Bit
•32-Bit (default)
|
AINS Soak
|
Automatic in-service soak time. The duration of time that must pass with an uninterrupted signal before the traffic/termination transitions to the IS-NR (ANSI) or unlocked-enabled (ETSI) service state.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for ADM-10G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-34 as needed.
Note In Table 6-34, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all ADM-10G cards. If a tab does not apply, it will not appear in CTC.
Table 6-34 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
•1-1 to 1-16 (OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
•17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
•18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
•19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support OC192 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
•1-1 to 1-16 (STM1/STM4/STM16/GE)
•17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
•18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
•19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support STM64 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state. For more information about administrative states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS
•IS,AINS
•OOS,DSBLD
•OOS,MT
|
•Unlocked
•Unlocked,automaticInService
•Locked,disabled
•Locked,maintenance
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR
•OOS-AU,AINS
•OOS-MA,DSBLD
•OOS-MA,MT
|
•Unlocked-enabled
•Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
•Locked-enabled,disabled
•Locked-enabled,maintenance
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled, or it can be set for one of three mode options.
|
•Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: (Not applicable for Gigabit Ethernet client interfaces) ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
•Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: (Not applicable for Gigabit Ethernet client interfaces) ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Note The AINS service state is not supported on interlink ports.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Note The AINS service state is not supported on interlink ports.
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected.
|
The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected.
|
Wavelength
|
Tunable wavelength.
|
Shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed in the format: first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths. For example, 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-8 are supported wavelengths.
|
Shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed in the format: first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths. For example, 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-8 are supported wavelengths.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET or SDH tabs.
Step 6 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-35 as needed.
Table 6-35 ADM-10G Line SONET or SDH Tab Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the client and trunk port number.
|
•1-1 to 1-16 (OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
•17-1 (OC192)
•18-1 (OC192/Interlink)
•19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support OC192 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
•1-1 to 1-16 (STM1/STM4/STM16/GE)
•17-1(STM64)
•18-1 (STM64/Interlink)
•19-1 (STM64
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support STM64 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
ProvidesSync
|
When checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SyncMsgIn
|
Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SF BER
|
Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-3
•1E-4
•1E-5
|
•1E-3
•1E-4
•1E-5
|
Send DoNotUse
|
When checked, sends a DUS message on the S1 byte.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
Type
|
(Display only) Type of node.
|
•SONET
•SDH
|
•SDH
|
Admin SSM In
|
Overrides the synchronization status message (SSM) synchronization traceability unknown (STU) value. If the node does not receive an SSM signal, it defaults to STU.
|
· PRS—Primary Reference Source (Stratum 1)
· ST2—Stratum 2
· TNC—Transit node clock
· ST3E—Stratum 3E
· ST3—Stratum 3
· SMC—SONET minimum clock
· ST4—Stratum 4
· DUS—Do not use for timing synchronization
· RES—Reserved; quality level set by user
|
· G811—Primary reference clock
· STU—Sync traceability unknown
· G812T—Transit node clock traceable
· G812L—Local node clock traceable
· SETS—Synchronous equipment
· DUS—Do not use for timing synchronization
|
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line section trace settings for the ADM-10G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The Section Trace tab is available for ports configured as OC-N (Ports 1 through 16, Ports 17 and 18 [only in a single-card configuration] and Port 19). Section trace is not available on interlink ports.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the section trace settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-36.
Table 6-36 ADM-10G Section Trace Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
•1-1 to 1-16 (OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
•17-1 (OC 192)
•18-1 (OC192)
•19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support OC192 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
•1-1 to 1-16 (STM1/STM4/STM16/GE)
•17-1 (STM64)
•18-1 (STM64)
•19-1 (STM64)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support STM64 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
•1 byte
•16 byte
•64 byte
|
•1 byte
•16 byte
•64 byte
|
Current
|
Current Transmit String displays the current transmit string; New Transmit String sets a new transmit string. Current String Type allows you to choose between ASCII or Hexadecimal format. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Current Received String displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for ADM-10G cards carrying SONET payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the line threshold settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET or SDH Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-37.
Table 6-37 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
•1-1 to 1-16 (OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
•17-1 (OC 192)
•18-1 (OC192)
•19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support OC192 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
•1-1 to 1-16 (STM1/STM4/STM16/GE)
•17-1 (STM 64)
•18-1 (STM64)
•19-1 (STM64)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support STM64 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
(Line Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
PSC
|
Protection Switching Count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
PSD
|
Protection Switching Duration
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
UAS
|
(Line Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload
Purpose
|
This task changes the line RMON threshold settings for an ADM-10G card carrying the 1G Ethernet payload.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note This task can only be performed if the ADM-10G card has at least one PPM port provisioned for Gigabit Ethernet.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the line RMON thresholds. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose the applicable Ethernet variable. See Table 6-38 for a list of available Ethernet variables.
Table 6-38 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds
Variable
|
Description
|
ifInOctets
|
Total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
|
ifInErrors
|
Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
|
ifOutOctets
|
Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
ifInMulticastPkts
|
Number of multicast frames received error-free.
|
ifInBroadcastPkts
|
Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to a higher layer or sublayer, that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer.
|
ifInErrorBytePkts
|
Number of receive error bytes.
|
dot3StatsFCSErrors
|
Number of frames with frame check errors; that is, there is an integral number of octets, but there is also an incorrect frame check sequence (FCS).
|
dot3StatsFrameTooLong
|
Number of received frames that were larger than the permitted maximum size.
|
dot3ControlInUnknownOpcodes
|
A count of MAC control frames received on this interface that contain an opcode not supported by this device.
|
dot3InPauseFrames
|
A count of MAC control frames received on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
|
dot3OutPauseFrames
|
A count of MAC control frames transmitted on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
|
etherStatsUndersizePkts
|
Total number of packets received that were well-formed and less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits and including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsFragments
|
Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (alignment error).
Note It is normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
|
etherStatsPkts64Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits and including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 65 and 127 octets in length, inclusive.
|
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets
|
The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 128 and 255 octets in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets.
|
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 256 and 511 octets in length, inclusive.
|
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets.
|
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets.
|
etherStatsBroadcastPkts
|
Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the interface that were directed to the broadcast address.
Note Multicast packets are not included.
|
etherStatsMulticastPkts
|
Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the interface that were directed to a multicast address.
Note This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
|
etherStatsOversizePkts
|
Total number of packets transmitted and received by the interface that were well-formed and longer than 1518 octets, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets.
|
etherStatsJabbers
|
Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits and including FCS octets), and had a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (alignment error).
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of received packets.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmit packets.
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the ADM-10G interlink or trunk port alarm and threshold crossing alert (TCA) thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the interlink or trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-39, verify the interlink or trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 6-39 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Port
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
17-1 and 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
-7.0 dBm
|
-27.0 dBm
|
6.0 dBm
|
-4.0 dBm
|
19-1 (Trunk)
|
-7.0 dBm
|
-27.0 dBm
|
6.0 dBm
|
-4.0 dBm
|
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-40, verify the interlink or trunk port alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-40 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Port
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 17 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
1.0 dBm
|
-13.0 dBm
|
1.0 dBm
|
-8.0 dBm
|
18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
-5.0 dBm
|
-30.0 dBm
|
5.0 dBm
|
-3.0 dBm
|
19-1 (Trunk)
|
-5.0 dBm
|
-30.0 dBm
|
5.0 dBm
|
-3.0 dBm
|
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the ADM-10G card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-13 and Table 6-14, verify the Port 1 to 16 (Client) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-13 and Table 6-14, verify the interlink ports 17-1 and 18-1 for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low settings. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing Enter.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line OTN settings for the ADM-10G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then click one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, ITU-T G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-41 through 6-44.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio buttons and click Refresh.
Table 6-41 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 6-41 ADM-10G Card OTN Lines Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
•18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
•19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
ITU-TG.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709.
|
•Enable
•Disable
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. FEC mode can be Disabled, Enabled, or, for the TXP_MR_10E, Enhanced FEC mode can be enabled to provide greater range and lower bit error rate. For TXP_MR_10E cards, Standard is the same as enabling FEC.
|
•Disable—FEC is off.
•Standard—Standard FEC is on.
•Enhanced—Enhanced FEC is on.
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
|
Synch Mapping
|
Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
|
Synch mapping
|
Table 6-42 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > ITU-T G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-42 ADM-10G Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
•18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
•19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
ES
|
Errored seconds. Selecting the SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC, overhead management, and PM using OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button selects path PM using ODUk.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel transport unit order of k overhead frame used for management and performance monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel data unit order of k overhead frame unit used for path performance monitoring.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Table 6-43 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 6-43 ADM-10G Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
•18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
•19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Displays the number of bit errors corrected during the selected time period.
|
Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or 1 day intervals.
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Displays the number of uncorrectable words in the selected time period.
|
Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or 1 day intervals.
|
Table 6-44 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-44 ADM-10GTrail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
•18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
•19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
•Section
•Path
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Disable FDI on TTIM
|
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section/Path overhead alarm arises because of a J0/J1 overhead string mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to the downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
•Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not disabled)
|
Transmit
|
Current Transmit String displays the current transmit string; New sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. In Transmit String Type, click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
|
Expected
|
Current Expected String displays the current expected string; New sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. In Expected String Type, click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Current Received String displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh (every 5 sec)
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G333 Add an ADM-10G card to an Existing Topology
Purpose
|
This procedure adds an ADM-10G card to an existing topology. Perform the steps in this procedure when OCHNC and DCC are present in the network. In case of OCH trails, delete all the circuits in Step 3 that traverses the port before deleting the OCH-trail.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
•G46 Log into CTC.
•Complete the turn up procedures in Turn Up a Node for the node to be added.
•An updated Cisco Transport Planner network plan recalculated with the new node.
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 If path protected circuits exist between Node A and Node B, complete the DLP-A197 Initiate a Path Protection Force Switch task. This task applies a force switch on the path between Node A and Node B.
Step 2 Complete the G129 Add a DWDM Node task to add Node C.
Step 3 Complete the G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections task to delete OCHNC circuit between Node A and Node B.
Step 4 Complete the G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, task to create OCHNC circuit between Node A-->Node C and Node C-->Node B for wavelength connectivity.
Note The ports on the card in Node C must be tuned to the same wavelength as Node A and Node B.
Step 5 Create DCC terminations on Node C. See the DLP-A377 Provision Section DCC Terminations task.
Alternatively, if additional bandwidth is needed for CTC management, complete the DLP-A378 Provision Line DCC Terminations task.
Step 6 Ensure that the DCCs are functional between Node A-->Node C and Node C-->Node B. See the G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations task.
Step 7 Complete the G200 Create, Delete, and Manage STS or VC Circuits for the ADM-10G Card to create pass-through STS or VC circuits in Node C.
Step 8 Complete the NTP-A301 Merge Circuits task for each circuit created.
Step 9 If path protected circuits exist between Node A and Node B, complete the DLP-A198 Clear a Path Protection Force Switch task. This task clears a force switch on the path between Node A and Node B.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Purpose
|
This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards.
G63 Install an SFP or XFP
G277 Provision a Multirate PPM (if necessary)
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate (if necessary)
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task at the node where you want to change the muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the "NTP-G103 Back Up the Database" procedure to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
•G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings
•G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings
•G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
•G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings
•G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings
•G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
•G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
•G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings
•G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Step 4 As needed, complete the "NTP-G103 Back Up the Database" procedure.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the card settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards, including payload type, termination mode, and wavelength.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-45.
Note Parameters shown in Table 6-45 do not apply to all 4x2.5G muxponder cards. If the parameter or option does not apply, it is not shown in CTC.
Table 6-45 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Termination Mode
|
Sets the mode of operation. Options that do not apply to a card do not display.
The MXP_2.5G_10G card is based on SONET/SDH multiplexing. The transparent mode terminates and rebuilds the B1 byte (as well as other bytes) of the incoming OC-48/STM-16 signal. The B2 byte is not touched.
The MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards are fully transparent in transparent mode based on the OTN/ITU-T G.709 multiplexing scheme. It does not terminate the B1 byte or other bytes.
It encapsulates OC-48/STM-16 bytes into ODU1 first, then multiplexes them into an OTU2.
Refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual for more details.
|
For ANSI platforms:
•Transparent
•Section (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only)
•Line (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
For ETSI platforms:
•Transparent
•Multiplex Section (MXP_2.5G_10G, only)
•Regeneration Section (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only)
|
AIS/Squelch
|
(MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only) Sets the transparent termination mode configuration.
|
•Ais
•Squelch
|
Tunable Wavelengths
|
(Display only) Shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed. For the MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards, the first and last supported wavelength, frequency spacing, and number of supported wavelengths are shown in the format: first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths. For example, the MXP_2.5G_10E_C card would show: 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82. The MXP_2.5G_10G and MXP_2.5G_10E show the four wavelengths supported by the card that is installed.
|
—
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) tabs.
Note The SONET tab appears only if you have created a PPM for a given port.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-46.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-46 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number. Ports 1 to 4 are client ports (OC-48/STM-16). Port 5 is the DWDM trunk (OC-192/STM-64) that provides wavelength services. Client ports will not appear of the pluggable port module is not provisioned for it.
|
•1
•2
•3
•4
•5 (Trunk) (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a logical name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
•IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
•OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
SF BER
|
Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-3
•1E-4
•1E-5
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of three mode options.
|
•Disable (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
Type
|
Sets the optical transport type.
|
•SONET
•SDH
|
SyncMsgIn
|
Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source. (This parameter does not appear for the MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.)
|
Checked or unchecked
|
ProvidesSync
|
Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference. (This parameter does not appear for the MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.)
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
Options: ANSI/ETSI
•Autoprovision/Autoprovision (default)
•SR
•SR 1/I-1—Short reach up to 2-km distance
•IR 1/S1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km distance
•IR 2/S2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km distance
•LR 1/L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance
•LR 2/L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance
•LR 3/L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance
|
Wavelength
|
Displays the wavelength of the client port.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths: 850 nm through 1560.61 nm
100-GHz ITU spacing CWDM spacing
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the section trace settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The Section Trace tab appears only if you have created a PPM for the card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-47.
Table 6-47 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Section Trace Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
•1
•2
•3
•4
•5 (Trunk; MXP_2.5G_10G only)
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
•Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size. Select either radio button.
|
•1 byte
•16 byte
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 minutes.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings
Purpose
|
This task provisions the trunk settings for the MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note This task does not apply to the MXP_2.5G_10G card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the trunk settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Trunk tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-48.
Table 6-48 MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Trunk Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number. Port 5 is the DWDM trunk (OC-192/STM-64) that provides wavelength services.
|
5 (Trunk)
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a logical name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
•IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
•OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of three mode options.
|
•Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
(OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-49.
Table 6-49 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
5 (Trunk)
|
Band
|
(Display only) Indicates the wavelength band available from the card that is installed. If the card is preprovisioned, the field can be provisioned to the band of the card that will be installed.
|
•C—The C-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
•L—The L-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
|
Even/Odd
|
Sets the wavelengths available for provisioning for MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. (This field does not apply to MXP_2.5G_10G or MXP_2.5G_10E cards.)
|
•Even—Displays even C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
•Odd—Displays odd C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
|
Wavelength
|
The wavelength provisioned for the trunk.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T C-band or L-band spacing, depending on the card that is installed. For MXP_2.5G_10G and MXP_2.5G_10E cards, the wavelengths carried by the card are identified with two asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) line threshold settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Table 6-50.
Note In Table 6-50, some parameter tabs or selections do not always apply to all 4x2.5G muxponder cards. If the tabs or selections do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Table 6-50 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options - ONS 15454
|
Options - ONS 15454 SDH
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
•1
•2
•3
•4
•5 (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
|
•1
•2
•3
•4
•5 (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SEFS
|
(Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
UAS
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Select TCA (if not already selected), a 15 Min or 1 Day PM interval radio button and then click Refresh.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-51, verify the trunk port (Port 5) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 6-51 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
Card
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
MXP_2.5G_10G
|
-8 dBm
|
-18 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
-1 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E
|
-9 dBm
|
-18 dBm
|
9 dBm
|
0 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E_C
|
-9 dBm
|
-18 dBm
|
9 dBm
|
0 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
|
-9 dBm
|
-18 dBm
|
9 dBm
|
0 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
|
-9 dBm
|
-18 dBm
|
9 dBm
|
0 dBm
|
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-52, verify the trunk port (Port 5) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 6-52 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
Card
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
MXP_2.5G_10G
|
-8 dBm
|
-20 dBm
|
4 dBm
|
2 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E
|
-8 dBm
|
-20 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
3 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E_C
|
-8 dBm
|
-20 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
3 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
|
-8 dBm
|
-20 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
3 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
|
-8 dBm
|
-20 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
3 dBm
|
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 6-53, verify the client Port N (where N = 1 through 4) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 6-53 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
|
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
OC-48
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
-3
|
-18
|
3
|
-16
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
0
|
-18
|
6
|
-11
|
STM-16
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
-3
|
-18
|
3
|
-16
|
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
0
|
-18
|
6
|
-11
|
Step 4 Repeat Step 3 to provision each additional client port.
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 6 Referring to Table 6-54, verify the client Port N (where N = 1 through 4) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 6-54 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Client Interfaces Alarm Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
|
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
OC-48
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
0
|
-21
|
0
|
-13
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
3
|
-21
|
3
|
-8
|
STM-16
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
0
|
-21
|
0
|
-13
|
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
3
|
-21
|
3
|
-8
|
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to provision each additional client port.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line OTN settings for MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the line OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, OTN G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-55 through 6-58.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-55 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Note In Table 6-55, some parameter tabs or values do not always apply to all MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. If the tabs or values do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Table 6-55 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line OTN Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
5 (Trunk)
|
G.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709.
|
•Enable
•Disable
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN line FEC mode. FEC mode can be Disabled or Enabled. With the MXP_2.5G_10E card, Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) mode can be enabled to provide greater range and lower bit error rate. E-FEC applies only to the MXP_2.5G_10E card.
|
•Enable—(MXP_2.5G_10G only) FEC is on.
•Disable—FEC is off.
•Standard—(MXP_2.5G_10E only) FEC is on.
•Enhanced—(MXP_2.5G_10E only) Enhanced FEC is on.
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
|
Asynch/Synch Mapping
|
(MXP_2.5G_10E only) The MXP_2.5G_10E can perform standard ODU multiplexing according to ITU-T G.709. The card uses this to aggregate the four OC-48 client signals.
|
•ODU Multiplex
|
Table 6-56 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-56 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
5 (Trunk)
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel transport unit order of k overhead frame used for management and performance monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel data unit order of k overhead frame unit used for path performance monitoring.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds. Two types of thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC, overhead management, and PM using OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button selects path PM using ODUk.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Table 6-57 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 6-57 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
5 (Trunk)
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Displays the number of bit errors corrected during the interval selected. The interval can be set for 15 minutes or one day.
|
Numeric
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Displays the number of uncorrectable words during the interval selected. The interval can be set for 15 minutes or one day.
|
Numeric
|
Table 6-58 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-58 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trail Trace Identifier Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
Sets the port number. The trail trace identifier is applicable only to the trunk interface, which handles ITU-T G.709 frames.
|
5 (Trunk)
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
•Section
•Path
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Disable FDI on TTIM
|
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to the downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
•Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not disabled)
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 minutes.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task at the node where you want to change the muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the "NTP-G103 Back Up the Database" procedure to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
•G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
•G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
•G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings
•G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
•G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
•G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
•G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
•G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
•G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see Chapter 10 "Manage Alarms."
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the client line settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in Table 6-59.
Table 6-59 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
•1
•2
|
Port Name
|
The user can assign a logical name for each of the ports shown by filling in this field.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
Note You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
•OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
•OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function.
|
•Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: (MXP_MR_2.5G only) ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
The reach distances that appear in the drop-down list depend on the card:
•Autoprovision—The system to automatically provision the reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value on the hardware.
•SX—Short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 550 meters. The operating wavelength range is 770-860 nm.
• LX—Long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 10 km. The operating wavelength range is 1270-1355 nm.
• CX—Two pairs of 150-ohm shielded twisted pair cable for a maximum length of 25 meters.
• T—Four pairs of Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair cable for a maximum length of 100 meters.
• DX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength range is 1430-1580 nm.
• HX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength range is 1280-1335 nm.
• ZX—Extended wavelength single-mode optical fiber for up to 100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.
• VX—Single mode up to 100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.
|
Wavelength
|
Displays the wavelength of the client port.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths:850 nm through 1560.61 nm; 100-GHz ITU spacing; CWDM spacing
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the distance extension settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note Distance extension settings can be changed only if the facilities are out of service (OOS,DSBLD).
Note The distance extension parameters only apply to client ports (Ports 1 to 8) and not to the trunk ports (Port 9 for MXP_MR_2.5G card or Ports 9 and 10 for the MXPP_MR_2.5G card).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the distance extension settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. A client port must be provisioned for the tab to be present.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
Step 3 Locate the Client port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If yes, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the following substeps:
a. Click the Admin State table cell and choose OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,Maintenance (ETSI).
b. Click Apply, then Yes.
Step 4 Click the Provisioning > Line > Distance Extension tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 5 Modify any of the settings for the Distance Extension tab as described in Table 6-60.
Table 6-60 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Distance Extension Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
•1
•2
|
Enable Distance Extension
|
Allows end-to-end distances of up to 1600 km for FC1G and up to 800 km for FC2G. If Distance Extension is enabled, set the connected Fibre Channel switches to Interop or Open Fabric mode, depending on the Fibre Channel switch. By default, the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G card will interoperate with the Cisco Multilayer Director Switch (MDS) storage products.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Auto Detect Credits
|
Allows automatic detection of buffer credits for Fibre Channel flow control.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Credits Available
|
(Display only) Displays the number of buffer credits available.
|
Numeric (range depends on the client equipment attached to the card)
|
Autoadjust GFP Buffer Threshold
|
Allows the threshold of the generic framing procedure (GFP) buffer between two MXP_MR_2.5G or two MXPP_MR_2.5G cards to be automatically adjusted.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
GFP Buffers Available
|
Displays the number of GFP buffers available between two MXP_MR_2.5G or two MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
|
Numeric
|
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the SONET (OC-48) or SDH (STM-16) settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) settings apply only to the trunk ports (Port 9 for the MXP_MR_2.5G card and Ports 9 and 10 for the MXPP_MR_2.5G card.)
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the OC-48/STM-64 settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the SONET or SDH tab as described in Table 6-61.
Table 6-61 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
9 (trunk for MXP_MR_2.5G) or 9 and 10 (trunks for MXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
•IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
•OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
SF BER1
|
Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-3
•1E-4
•1E-5
|
SD BER1
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of three mode options.
|
•Disable (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
Type
|
The optical transport type.
|
•SONET (ANSI)
•SDH (ETSI)
|
SyncMsgIn
|
Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Send DoNotUse
|
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When checked, sends a DUS message on the S1 byte.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
ProvidesSync
|
Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the section trace settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in the Section Trace tab as described in Table 6-62.
Table 6-62 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Section Trace Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
•9 (trunk port for MXP_MR_2.5G)
•9 and 10 (trunk ports for MXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the received trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
•Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
•1 byte
•16 byte
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-63.
Table 6-63 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
9 (Trunk)
10 (Trunk) (MXPP_MR_2.5G only)
|
Band
|
(Display only) Indicates the wavelength band that can be provisioned.
|
C—Only the C band is available
|
Even/Odd
|
Sets the wavelengths available for provisioning. This field does not apply to MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G cards
|
—
|
Wavelength
|
The wavelength provisioned for the trunk.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T, C-band spacing. If the card is installed, the wavelengths it carries are identified with two asterisks. Other wavelengths have a dark grey background. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as shown in Table 6-64.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note In Table 6-64, some parameters or options do not apply to all MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G cards. If the parameters or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Table 6-64 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Threshold Settings
Field
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 Options
|
ONS 15454 SDH Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
•9 (MXP_MR_2.5G)
•9 and 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
•9 (MXP_MR_2.5G)
•9 and 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SEFS
|
(Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
UAS
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Regeneration Section (only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for MXP_MR_10G and MXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying the 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Display the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See Table 6-65 for a list of available Ethernet variables.
Table 6-65 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR 2.5G Card 1G Ethernet or 1G, 2G FC/FICON Variables
Variable
|
Description
|
ifInOctets
|
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of receive packets.
|
ifInDiscards
|
Number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
|
ifInErrors
|
Total number of receive errors.
|
ifOutOctets
|
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmitted packets.
|
ifOutDiscards
|
Number of outbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated
|
Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes. This value is a part of high-level data link control (HDLC) and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong
|
Number of received frames that exceed the maximum transmission unit (MTU). This value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of receive data frames with payload cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
8b10bInvalidOrderedSets
|
Number of 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel line side.
|
8b10bStatsEncodingDispErrors
|
Number of 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel line side.
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note Throughout this task, trunk port refers to Port 9 (MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G) and Port 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G only).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 3 Verify the trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High is -9 dBm and for RX Power Low is -23 dBm. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 4 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Verify the trunk port Alarm thresholds for RX Power High is -7 dBm and for RX Power Low is -26 dBm. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 6-66, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 6-66 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
|
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-15
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
ONE_GE
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-17
|
0
|
-16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-20
|
-3
|
-16
|
3
|
ESCON
|
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
-21
|
-14
|
-32
|
-11
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision each additional client port.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-67, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Table 6-67 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
Port Type
(by CTC)
|
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-18
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
ONE_GE
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
ESCON
|
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
-24
|
-11
|
-35
|
-8
|
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision each additional client port. When you have finished provisioning client ports, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task at the node where you want to change the muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the "NTP-G103 Back Up the Database" procedure to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
•G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
•G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
•G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
•G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings
•G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
•G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
•G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 Payloads
•G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
•G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
•G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see Chapter 10 "Manage Alarms."
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Client tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in Table 6-68.
Table 6-68 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Client Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
1 through 8
|
Port Name
|
The user can assign a logical name for each of the ports shown by filling in this field.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
Note You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the Appendix B, "Administrative and Service States" in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
•OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to Appendix B, "Administrative and Service States" in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
•OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode.
|
•Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
Reach
|
Sets the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
The reach distances that appear in the drop-down list depend on the card:
•Autoprovision—The system to automatically provision the reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value on the hardware.
•SX—Short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 550 meters. The operating wavelength range is 770-860 nm.)
• LX—Long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 10 km. The operating wavelength range is 1270-1355 nm.)
• CX—Two pairs of 150-ohm shielded twisted pair cable for a maximum length of 25 meters.)
• T—Four pairs of Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair cable for a maximum length of 100 meters.)
• DX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength range is 1430-1580 nm.)
• HX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength range is 1280-1335 nm.)
• ZX—Extended wavelength single-mode optical fiber for up to 100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.)
• VX—Single mode up to 100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.)
|
Wavelength
|
Displays the wavelength of the client port.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths:
850 nm through 1560.61 nm
100-GHz ITU spacing
CWDM spacing
|
Squelch
|
Shuts down the far-end laser in response to certain defects. (Squelch does not apply to ISC COMPACT payloads.)
|
•Squelch
•Disable
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the distance extension settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder card ports provisioned for Fibre Channel or FICON payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The distance extension parameters only apply to client ports (Ports 1 to 8) and not to the trunk port (Port 9).
Note The client port must be in the OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) state in order to change the distance extension settings. If a Y-cable is provisioned on the client port, both the working and protect client ports must be in OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) state before you change the distance extension settings.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to change the distance extension settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Distance Extension tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-69.
Table 6-69 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Distance Extension Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number. Up to eight ports might appear based on the number of pluggable port modules that are provisioned.
|
—
|
Enable Distance Extension
|
Allows end-to-end distances of up to 1600 km for FC1G and up to 800 km for FC2G. If Distance Extension is enabled, set the connected Fibre Channel switches to Interop or Open Fabric mode, depending on the Fibre Channel switch. By default, the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card will interoperate with the Cisco MDS storage products.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Fast Switch
|
If unchecked, the end-to-end fiber channel link is reinitialized every time a Y-cable protection switch occurs. If checked, reinitialization of the link is avoided when a Y-cable protection switch occurs, thus reducing the traffic hit considerably.
This feature is supported for FC1G, FC2G, FC4G, FICON1G, FICON2G, and FICON4G trunk failures as well as user-initiated Y-cable protection switch such as, Manual, Force, or Lockout. It is recommended that you do not enable the Fast Switch option as the link may not come up after a Y-cable protection switch in certain cases.
Note This option can be used only if you have unchecked Enable Distance Extension option.
|
Checked or unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Wavelength Trunk Settings tab as described in Table 6-70.
Table 6-70 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
Port 9 (Trunk)
|
Band
|
Indicates the wavelength band that can be provisioned. The field is display-only when a physical MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L is installed. If the card is provisioned in CTC only, you can provision the band for the card that will be installed.
|
•C—The C-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
•L—The L-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
|
Even/Odd
|
Sets the wavelengths available for provisioning.
|
•Even—Displays even C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
•Odd—Displays odd C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
|
Wavelength
|
The wavelength provisioned for the trunk.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU spacing
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the OC-192 (ANSI)/STM-64 (ETSI) settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-71.
Table 6-71 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
9 (Trunk)
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
•IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the "Administrative and Service States" appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
•OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
SF BER1
|
Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-3
•1E-4
•1E-5
|
SD BER1
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
Type
|
The optical transport type.
|
•SONET (ANSI)
•SDH (ETSI)
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of three mode options.
|
•Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
•Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
ProvidesSync
|
Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as a NE timing reference.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SyncMsgIn
|
Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Send DoNotUse
|
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the section trace settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Section Trace tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in the Section Trace tab as described in Table 6-72.
Table 6-72 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line Section Trace Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
•9 (trunk only)
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the received trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If a TIM on section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
•Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
•1 byte
•16 byte
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or select the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or SDH Thresholds (ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as shown in Table 6-73.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note In Table 6-73, some parameters and options do not apply to all MXP_MR_10DME cards. If the parameter or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Table 6-73 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options - ONS 15454
|
Options - ONS 15454 SDH
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
•9 (Trunk)
|
•9 (Trunk)
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
—
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
SEFS
|
(Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
•Direction—Near End or Far End
•Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
•Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click Refresh.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards carrying Ethernet, FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), display the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port, either the payload port, for example "1-1 (ONE_GE)", or the equivalent ITU-T G.7041 GFP (Generic Frame Procedure) port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet, FC, FICON, or ISC variable. See Table 6-74 for a list of available Ethernet variables, Table 6-75 for a list of FC and FICON variables, Table 6-76 for a list of ISC and ISC3 variables, and Table 6-77 for a list of GFP variables.
Table 6-74 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Ethernet Variables
Variable
|
Description
|
ifInOctets
|
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of receive packets.
|
ifInErrors
|
Total number of receive errors.
|
ifOutOctets
|
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmitted packets.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated
|
Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes. This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong
|
Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSum
|
Number of code violations/running disparity errors in the 8b/10b encoded characters received.
|
Table 6-75 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L FC/FICON Variables
Variable
|
Description
|
ifInOctets
|
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of receive packets.
|
ifInErrors
|
Total number of receive errors.
|
ifOutOctets
|
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmitted packets.
|
ifOutOversizePkts
|
Total number of oversized packets output from the interface.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated
|
Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes. This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong
|
Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
fcStatsZeroTxCredits
|
This is a count that increments when the FC/FICON Tx credits go from a non-zero value to zero.
|
fcStatsRxRecvrReady
|
Number of received RDY (Receive Ready) order set.
|
fcStatsTxRecvrReady
|
Number of transmitted RDY (Receive Ready) order set.
|
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSum
|
Number of Code Violations/Running Disparity errors in the 8b/10b encoded characters received.
|
Table 6-76 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L ISC and ISC3Variables
Variable
|
Description
|
ifInOctets
|
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of receive packets.
|
ifOutOctets
|
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmitted packets.
|
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSum
|
Number of Code Violations/Running Disparity errors in the 8b/10b encoded characters received.
|
Table 6-77 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L GFP RMON Variables
Variable
|
Description
|
gfpStatsRxSBitErrors
|
Received generic framing protocol (GFP) frames with single bit errors in the core header (these errors are correctable).
|
gfpStatsRxTypeInvalid
|
Received GFP frames with invalid type (these are discarded). For example, receiving GFP frames that contain Ethernet data when we expect Fibre Channel data.
|
gfpStatsRxSblkCRCErrors
|
Total number of superblock CRC errors with the receive transparent GFP frame. A transparent GFP frame has multiple superblocks which each contain Fibre Channel data.
|
gfpStatsCSFRaised
|
Number of Rx client management frames with Client Signal Fail indication.
|
gfpStatsLFDRaised
|
The number of Core HEC CRC Multiple Bit Errors.
Note This count is only for cHEC multiple bit error when in frame. It is a count of when the state machine goes out of frame.
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list, choose either Relative or Absolute. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click OK.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click TCA and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Verify the trunk port (Port 9) TCA thresholds are set at the values shown as follows. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and press Enter.
•RX Power High: -9 dBm
•RX Power Low: -18 dBm
•TX Power High: 9 dBm
•TX Power Low: 0 dBm
Step 5 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Verify the trunk port (Port 9) Alarm thresholds are set at the values shown as follows. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and press Enter.
•RX Power High: -8 dBm
•RX Power Low: -20 dBm
•TX Power High: 7 dBm
•TX Power Low: 3 dBm
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Optics Thresholds tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to Table 6-78, verify the client ports (Ports 1 through 8) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the "Transponder and Muxponder Cards" chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 6-78 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
PPM Port Rate
|
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
|
TCA RX
Power High
|
TCA RX
Power Low
|
TCA TX
Power High
|
TCA TX
Power Low
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
0
|
-17
|
3
|
-16
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-3
|
-20
|
3
|
-16
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
0
|
-15
|
3
|
-16
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-3
|
-20
|
3
|
-16
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
0
|
-17
|
3
|
-16
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-3
|
-20
|
3
|
-16
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
0
|
-17
|
3
|
-16
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-3
|
-20
|
3
|
-16
|
ISC3 PEER 1G
ISC3 PEER 2G
|
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
0
|
-17
|
3
|
-16
|
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
0
|
-20
|
3
|
-16
|
FC4G
|
ONS-SE-4G-MM
|
0
|
-12
|
4
|
-15
|
ONS-SE-4G-SM
|
-1
|
-15
|
4
|
-15
|
FICON4G
|
ONS-SE-4G-MM
|
0
|
-12
|
4
|
-15
|
ONS-SE-4G-SM
|
-1
|
-15
|
4
|
-15
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to provision each additional client port.
Step 6 Under Types, click the Alarm radio button and click Refresh.
Step 7 Referring to Table 6-79, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting Enter.
Table 6-79 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds
PPM Port Rate
|
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
|
Alarm RX
Power Low
|
Alarm RX
Power High
|
Alarm TX
Power Low
|
Alarm TX
Power High
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-18
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
ISC3 PEER 1G
ISC3 PEER 2G
|
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
-20
|
3
|
-13
|
-1
|
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
-23
|
0
|
-13
|
0
|
FC4G
|
ONS-SE-4G-MM
|
-15
|
3
|
-11
|
-1
|
ONS-SE-4G-SM
|
-18
|
2
|
-11
|
0
|
FICON4G
|
ONS-SE-4G-MM
|
-15
|
3
|
-11
|
-1
|
ONS-SE-4G-SM
|
-18
|
2
|
-11
|
0
|
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 to provision each additional client port.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the OTN settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > OTN tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs: OTN Lines, G.709 Thresholds, FEC Thresholds, or Trail Trace Identifier.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables 6-80 through 6-83.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-80 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 6-80 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card OTN Line Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
9 (Trunk)
|
G.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709.
|
•Enable
•Disable
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN lines to forward error correction (FEC).
|
•Standard
•Enhanced
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
Asynch/Synch Mapping
|
Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
|
•Asynch mapping
•Synch mapping
|
Table 6-81 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-81 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port1
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
9 (Trunk)
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click Refresh.
|
Table 6-82 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 6-82 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card FEC Threshold Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
2
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Sets the value for bit errors corrected.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Sets the value for uncorrectable words.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Table 6-83 describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-83 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
2
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
•Section
•Path
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
•Off/None
•Manual
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Disable FDI on TTIM
|
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to the downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
•Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
•Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not disabled)
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click Hex to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click ASCII to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the "DLP-G46 Log into CTC" task at the node where you want to change the muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the "NTP-G103 Back Up the Database" procedure to save the existing settings before modifying.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
•G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings
•G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings
•G667 Change the 40G Muxponder Line SONET (OC-192) or SDH (STM-64), or Ethernet Line Settings
•G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
•G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
•G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC Payloads
•G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
•G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
•G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see Chapter 10 "Manage Alarms."
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the card settings for the 40G-MXP-C card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Card tabs.
Step 3 Modify either of the settings described in Table 6-84.
Table 6-84 40G-MXP-C Card Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 Options
|
ONS 15454 SDH Options
|
Card Mode
|
Sets the card mode.
|
•Muxponder
•Unidirectional Regen
Set the mode to Unidirectional Regen under the following conditions:
–Trunk port is in OOS,DSBLD state.
–Pluggable port modules of the card must not be configured for payload.
–Regeneration peer slot must be set to None.
|
•Muxponder
•Unidirectional Regen
Set the mode to Unidirectional Regen under the following conditions:
–Trunk port is in locked,disabled state.
–Pluggable port modules of the card must not be configured for payload.
–Regeneration peer slot must be set to None.
|
Trunk Wavelengths
|
(Display only) Shows supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed. 40G-MXP-C show the C-band wavelengths supported by the card that is installed.
|
—
|
—
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for the 40G-MXP-C muxponder card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs. Tabs and parameters vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in Table 6-85.
Table 6-85 40G-MXP-C Card Line Client Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
•1 through 4 (client)
•5 (trunk)
|
Port Name
|
A logical name for each of the port. This field is blank by default.
|
Type up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters.
For details, see the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
Note You can assign a port name for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the 40G-MXP-C card, enabling the MDS Fabric Manager to associate the SAN port and a SAN port on the Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information, see Appendix B, "Administrative and Service States" in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
•OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
•IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Shows the general condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, see Appendix B, "Administrative and Service States" in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
|
•IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
•OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
•OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
ALS Mode
|
(client ports only) Activates the ALS mode.
|
•Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down during LOS.
•Auto Restart: (OC-192/STM-64 only) ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down during LOS. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down during LOS. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
•Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
•Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
•0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
Reach
|
Sets the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
•Autoprovision—The system automatically provisions the reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value on the hardware.
•EW
•LW
•SW
•LRM
•ER
•LR
•SR
•ZR
•IR 2
•LR 2
•DWDM
•CWDM40km
|
Wavelength
|
Provisions the port wavelength.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths:
Further wavelengths in the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band spacing. The card wavelengths are marked by asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background.
|
Squelch
|
Shuts down the far-end laser in response to certain defects.
|
•Squelch (Squelch does not apply to ISC COMPACT payloads.)
•Disable
|
Overclock
|
(trunk port only) Enables or disables overclock mode on the trunk port.
|
•OFF (default)
•ON
|
Rx Wavelength
|
(trunk port only) Provisions the trunk port wavelength.
|
•First Tunable Wavelength
•Further wavelengths:
Further wavelengths in the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band spacing. The card wavelengths are marked by asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background.
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G667 Change the 40G Muxponder Line SONET (OC-192) or SDH (STM-64), or Ethernet Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line SONET OC-192 or SDH STM-64, or ethernet line settings for the 40G-MXP-C muxponder card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card where you want to change the SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line > SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI). Tabs and parameters vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 To modify the line SONET or SDH settings, see Table 6-86. To modify the ethernet line settings see Table 6-87.
Table 6-86 40G-MXP-C Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
Parameter
|
Description
|
Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
1 through 4 (client)
|
Port Name
|
A logical name assigned to a port. This field is blank by default.
|
Type up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
For details, see the "DLP-G104 Assign a Name to a Port" task.
|
SF BER
|
Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
•1E-3
•1E-4
•1E-5
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
•1E-5
•1E-6
•1E-7
•1E-8
•1E-9
|
ProvidesSync
|
(Display only) Displays the ProvidesSync card parameter state.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SyncMsgIn
|
Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Send DoNotUse
|
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Type
|
The optical transport type.
|
•SONET (ANSI)
•SDH (ETSI)
|
Termination Mode
|
(Display-only for Standard Regeneration and Enhanced FEC card configurations) Sets the mode of operation.
|
•Transparent
•Section (ANSI) or Regeneration Section (RS) (ETSI)
•Line (ANSI) or Multiplex Section (MS) (ETSI)
|
Table 6-87 Ethernet Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C Card
Parameter
|
Description
|
ONS 15454 (ANSI) Options
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
1 through 4 (client)
|
1 through 4 (client)
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the |
Feedback
